<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Neodam</id>
	<title>Speedsolving.com Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Neodam"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php/Special:Contributions/Neodam"/>
	<updated>2026-10-21T06:33:07Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.8</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22065</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22065"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:58:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Permute up edges */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners ([[CPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges ([[EPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[EO]] Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece). (You can use [[CPLL]] instead.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(You can use [[EPLL]] instead.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
P.S. For permuting corners and edges in top layer you can simply use [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22064</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22064"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:56:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Permute up edges */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners ([[CPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges ([[EPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[EO]] Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece). (You can use [[CPLL]] instead.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(You can use [[EPLL]] instead.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22063</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22063"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:56:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Permute up corners */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners ([[CPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges ([[EPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[EO]] Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece). (You can use [[CPLL]] instead.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22062</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22062"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:55:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Permute up corners */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners ([[CPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges ([[EPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[EO]] Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece). (You can use [[CPLL]].)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22061</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22061"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:53:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Permute up corners */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners ([[CPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges ([[EPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[EO]] Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22060</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22060"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:51:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners ([[CPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges ([[EPLL]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[EO]] Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22059</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22059"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:47:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners (CPLL)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges (EPLL)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[EO]] Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22058</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22058"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:45:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=70+ &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners (CPLL)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges (EPLL)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EO Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22057</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22057"/>
		<updated>2012-11-06T08:21:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Put corners with down color in right place */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross (Permute U and D edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place (Solve E-Slice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross (Fix D Edges)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place (Solve D Corners)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners (CPLL)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges (EPLL)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== EO Detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Looking at the edges on the U face, D face, F face of the E-slice, and B face of the E-slice:&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has L/R color it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the sticker has F/B color, look at the sticker on the other side of the edge.&lt;br /&gt;
: * If the side sticker has U/D color, it&#039;s a bad edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 2 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place one bad edge on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat with Orienting 4+ bad edges approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 4 + Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Place four bad edges on F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt; and then do a F/B quarter turn. Repeat until there are no more bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orienting 6 Bad Edges ===&lt;br /&gt;
Often, 6 bad edges can be oriented more efficiently by placing 3 bad edges into F/B using &amp;lt;R, U, L, D, F2, B2&amp;gt;, performing an F/B quarter turn, and then using the 4 + approach to correctly orient the remaining 4 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to turn a bad edge into a good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section can also be done with Roux L4E, but on E instead of M. Bear in mind you can still have an EP parity because the rest of the edges / corners are not solved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has FR (front-right) edge switched with BR (back-right) edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
:Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
:Large Movecount&lt;br /&gt;
:Lookahead is limited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22050</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22050"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T23:30:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube can have good or bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example solve==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up face yellow:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Front face blue:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scramble: L2 B2 U&#039; B2 R2 U&#039; B2 F2 L2 F2 U B L D&#039; U L U&#039; F2 U2 F L&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges  : L R&#039; F U F R2 F&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross: R&#039; L&#039; U L R D&#039; R&#039; L&#039; D2 L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners: U D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U D2 (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U2 D (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R) U&#039; R2 D&#039; (R&#039; D L2 D&#039; R)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place: R2 L2 F2 B2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross: D2 U R2 D&#039; R2 D2 R2 D2 R2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place: U D (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&#039;(R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D2 (R2 U R2 U&#039; R2) D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners:  U&#039; (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2)  U2 (R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2) D2 U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges: (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U&#039; (R2 U2 R2 U2 R2) U2 (R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2) U&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22049</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22049"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T22:03:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube can have good or bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22048</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22048"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T20:02:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* External links */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Beginner method]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[One-Handed Solving]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube can have good or bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22047</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22047"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T19:56:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Beginner method]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[One-Handed Solving]]&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube can have good or bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:One-Handed Solving]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22046</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22046"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T19:30:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Orient edges */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube can have good or bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22045</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22045"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T18:26:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Experimental methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22044</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22044"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T18:02:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5 and for 7 and 8 steps  use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Zagorec_method.gif&amp;diff=22043</id>
		<title>File:Zagorec method.gif</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Zagorec_method.gif&amp;diff=22043"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T16:31:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22042</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22042"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T16:06:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Pros */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just 5 easy algorithms to remember.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can be performed very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22041</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22041"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T16:02:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Permute up edges */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need two algorithms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 (switches opposite edges, UF (up-front) and UB (up-back) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. R2 U R2 U R2 U2 R2 U2 R2 U R2 U’ R2 (switches adjacent edges, UF (up-front) and UR (up-right) edge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer edges on proper positions using only algorithms for switching adjacent edges and switching opposite edges. For putting edges in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cube is solved!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22040</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22040"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T16:01:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Permute up corners */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 U’ D R2 U’ R2 U R2 (switches UFR and UBR piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to put top layer corners on proper positions using only algorithm for switching adjacent corners. For putting corners in desired position you can use only U move.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the end of this step you will have headlights on each side of top layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22039</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22039"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T16:00:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Put corners with down color in right place */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you will need one algorithm: R2 U R2 U’ R2 (puts UFR piece in DFR position) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through entire step you must not rotate cube, use only U and D moves to position pieces.&lt;br /&gt;
Piece that you need to put in DFR position (down-front-right) you must place in UFR (up-front-right) position and then perform the algorithm. &lt;br /&gt;
For placing pieces in UFR position use only U move. If there is no more bottom layer pieces in top layer you need to put incorrectly placed piece from bottom layer in top layer using algorithm and then place it back in proper position in bottom layer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every time when you perform R2 U R2 U’ R2 algorithm your cube will end up with MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece. Just ignore this. It is only important that you don’t rotate cube trough 6., 7., and 8. step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of this step your bottom and middle layers are solved or your bottom layer is solved and middle layer has MFR (middle-front-right) piece switched with MBR (middle-back-right) piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22038</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22038"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T16:00:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Build proper down cross */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build down color (white) cross using only R2, U and D face turns. You have to color match down cross edges with centers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Step 4. and 5. can be performed simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22037</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22037"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:59:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Put middle layer edges on right place */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place middle layer edges in right position using just R2, L2, B2 and F2 moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that step you should have in middle layer on front face only front face color (blue), on back face only back face color (green), on left face only left face color (orange) and on right face only right face color (red).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22036</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22036"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:59:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Orient corners */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step you have to orient all corners. You can have down layer corners on top layer and up layer corners on bottom layer.  Only important thing in this step is that corners are oriented properly.  &lt;br /&gt;
For this you will use just one algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
R’ D L2 D’ R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place incorrectly oriented corners in UFL (up-front-left) position with up or down face color sticker on left side and second corner on DFR (down-front-right) position with up or down face color sticker on  front side. Now perform algorithm.&lt;br /&gt;
For placing corners on UFL and DFR position you can use only U, D, R2 and L2 moves and you must not rotate the cube.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are left with 3 unoriented corners you will not be in position to orient 2 corners in same time. In case like that you need to perform algorithm and it will orient just one. Now you have 2 unoriented corners and you need to perform algorithm just once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After finishing this step cube will have on up and down face just up and down color stickers mixed up, middle layer will have in front and back face just front and back colors stickers mixed up and on left and right side Left and right color stickers mixed up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22035</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22035"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:58:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Build up and down cross */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step is done intuitively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now build cross on up and down face with up and down colors. You can put edges with down or up color (white or yellow) on up or down face. It doesn&#039;t matter if you put down color on up face or up color on down face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22034</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22034"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:57:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Orient edges */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
Good edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with up or down color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the top layer, white (or yellow) oriented up &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker on the bottom layer, white (or yellow) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer up or down color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with white (or yellow) sticker in the middle layer, white (or yellow) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with left or right color on the sides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on top layer blue oriented up and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on bottom layer blue oriented down and red (or orange) facing side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In  the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with left or right color on the side&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back and red (or orange) facing side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bad edges:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the top and bottom layer, edge with left or right color facing up or down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the top layer, red (or orange)  oriented up&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker on the bottom layer, red (or orange) oriented down&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the middle layer right or left  color on the front or back face &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented front &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with red (or orange) sticker in the middle layer, red (or orange) oriented back&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. On the top and bottom layer, edge with front or back color facing up or down but with up or down color on the side (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the top layer, blue (or green) oriented up, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker on the bottom layer, blue (or green) oriented down, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left, right, front or back)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. In the middle layer front or back color on the front or back face but with up or down color on the side (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented front, white (or yellow) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g.: edge with blue (or green) sticker in the middle layer, blue (or green) oriented back, red (or orange) oriented on side face (left or right)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We need cube with all 12 good edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How bad edge turn into good edge:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We can have 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 good edges on the F face, with F or F&#039; turn we will transform 4 good edges into 4 bad edges and the other way around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 2 bad edges then we have to put one bad edge in front face, perform F turn and now we have 1 good edge and 3 bad edges on the front face. Now put the other bad edge on the place of that one good edge in the F face and perform another F turn. Now we have 0 bad edges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 4 bad edges, we have to put all bad edges into front face but without F, F&#039; and B, B&#039; turns and then make F or F&#039; turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 3:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 6 bad edges then we do Case 2 one time and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 4:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 8 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 5:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 10 bad edges then we do Case 2 two times and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Case 6: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If we have 12 bad edges then we do turn F and B and Case 1 one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22033</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22033"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:51:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to hold the cube==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to hold the cube (for easier understanding of examples):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
White center on down face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yellow center on up face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blue center on front face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Green center on back face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Red center on the right face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Orange center on the left face&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build up and down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Orient corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put middle layer edges on right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Build proper down cross==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Put corners with down color in right place==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up corners==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permute up edges==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22032</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22032"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:48:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22031</id>
		<title>Zagorec method</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=Zagorec_method&amp;diff=22031"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:47:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: Created page with &amp;quot;{{Method Infobox |name=Zagorec |image=Zagorec_method.gif |proposers=Damjan Zagorec |year=2012 |anames |algs=5 |variants |steps=8 |moves=60 to  |purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;  }} The...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Method Infobox&lt;br /&gt;
|name=Zagorec&lt;br /&gt;
|image=Zagorec_method.gif&lt;br /&gt;
|proposers=[[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
|year=2012&lt;br /&gt;
|anames&lt;br /&gt;
|algs=5&lt;br /&gt;
|variants&lt;br /&gt;
|steps=8&lt;br /&gt;
|moves=60 to &lt;br /&gt;
|purpose=&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Zagorec method is a 3x3 method created by [[Damjan Zagorec]] in 2012..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Steps ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following steps describe an approach suited for beginners, more advanced users might combine steps 4 and 5  ([[COLL]]) or use a [[Fridrich]] type last layer and do [[OLL]] and then [[PLL]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Orient edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Build up and down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Orient corners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Put middle layer edges on right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Build proper down cross&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Put corners with down color in right place&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Permute up corners &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Permute up edges&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pros ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Petrus variations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Petrus as a Beginner Method ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 beginner methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:3x3x3 Speedsolving Methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=List_of_methods&amp;diff=22030</id>
		<title>List of methods</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php?title=List_of_methods&amp;diff=22030"/>
		<updated>2012-11-05T15:37:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Neodam: /* Table of methods by purpose */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;:For a category view, see &#039;&#039;[[:Category:Methods and substeps|Methods and substeps]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Table of methods by purpose ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a table of methods (and their variants) for solving various twisty puzzles. Follow the links to read more about each method or the methods in the category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;TablePager&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;padding:3px; border-spacing:0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!| Name&lt;br /&gt;
!| Original Proposer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
!| Variants&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot; | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:2x2x2 beginner methods|2x2 Beginner]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[LBL]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Waterman Last Layer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [http://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php/Beginner_Guimond#Guimond_as_a_Beginner_Method Beginner Guimond]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Conrad Rider]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:2x2x2 speedsolving methods|2x2 Speed]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[CLL]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Various&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[NMCLL]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Gilles Roux]], [http://www.speedsolving.com/wiki/index.php/User:Athefre James Straughan]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[EG]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Erik Akkersdijk]], [[Gunnar Krig]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Guimond]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Gaétan Guimond]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Ortega]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Victor Ortega]],&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;[[Josef Jelinek]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[SS]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Mitchell Stern]], [[Timothy Sun]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[OFOTA]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Erik Akkersdijk]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[VOP]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Kenneth Gustavsson]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:3x3x3 beginner methods|3x3 Beginner]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[LBL]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Keyhole]], [[XG]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Corners First]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Marc Waterman]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Edges First]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Beginner Petrus]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Zagorec method]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Damjan Zagorec]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[8355]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Reheart Sheu]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Sexy Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:3x3x3 speedsolving methods|3x3 Speed]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[ZZ]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Zbigniew Zborowski]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[ZZ-VH]], [[ZZ-a]], [[ZZ-b]], [[ZZ-d]],&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;[[ZZ-WV]], [[MGLS| MGLS-Z]], [[ZZ-blah]], [[EJLS]], [[JTLE]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Waterman]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Marc Waterman]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Tripod]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Michael Gottlieb]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[L2L]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Duncan Dicks]], [[Stachu Korick]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Hahn]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Eric Hahn]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:3x3x3 speedsolving methods|3x3 Speed]]/[[:Category:SpeedBLD methods|SpeedBLD]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[CFOP]] (Fridrich)&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Jessica Fridrich]],&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;and others&lt;br /&gt;
| [[CLL]]/[[ELL]], [[VH]], [[ZB]], [[MGLS| MGLS-F]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:3x3x3 speedsolving methods|3x3 Speed]]/[[Fewest Moves techniques|FMC]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Petrus]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Lars Petrus]] &lt;br /&gt;
| [[JTLE]], [[EJLS]], [[MGLS| MGLS-P]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Roux]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Gilles Roux]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Heise]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Ryan Heise]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Snyder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Anthony Snyder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:Blindsolving Methods|3x3 BLD]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[3OP]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[John White]]?&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Old Pochmann]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Stefan Pochmann]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[M2/R2]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Stefan Pochmann]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Deadalnix]] ([[M2]]),&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Freestyle for Dummies ([[R2]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[TuRBo]] &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Erik Akkersdijk]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[BH]] &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Daniel Beyer]],&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Chris Hardwick]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[ZBLD]] &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Chris Tran]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ZBLD-2Cycle, ZBLD-3Cycle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:Experimental methods|Experimental]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Human Thistlethwaite]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Morwen Thistlethwaite]]&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;[[Ryan Heise]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Belt]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Salvia Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[David Salvia]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Triangular Francisco]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Michael Gottlieb]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Orient First]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Lars Nielsson]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[E15 / E35]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[3CFCEP]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[3CFCE]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[PEG]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[PORT]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[FRED]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Baian Liu]], [[Timothy Sun]], [[Stachu Korick]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:Big Cube Methods|Big Cubes Speed]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Reduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Cage]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Per Kristen Fredlund]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[K4]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Thom Barlow]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Sandwich]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Nicholas Ho]] &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Kenneth&#039;s Big Cubes Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Kenneth Gustavsson]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Z4]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[User:Cride5|Conrad Rider]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[js4]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[:Category:Blindsolving methods|Big Cubes BLD]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[r2]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Erik Akkersdijk]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[BH]] &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Daniel Beyer]],&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Chris Hardwick]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Pyraminx methods|Pyraminx]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pyraminx methods|Corners First]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pyraminx methods|Layer First]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
|  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pyraminx methods|Last 4 Edges]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ?? &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pyraminx methods|Petrus]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ?? &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pyraminx methods|Face Permute]]&lt;br /&gt;
| ??&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pyraminx methods|WO]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Oscar Roth Andersen]] (Odder)&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pyraminx methods|Oka Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Yohei Oka]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Megaminx methods|Megaminx]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ...&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Square-1 methods|Square-1]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[SSS1M]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Shelley Chang]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Vandenbergh Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Lars Vandenbergh]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[List of Rubik&#039;s Clock methods|Rubik&#039;s Clock]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ...&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[List of Rubik&#039;s Magic methods|Magic]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ...&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[List of Master Magic methods|Master Magic]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Pochmann Method]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Stefan Pochmann]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Ooms]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Alexander Ooms]]&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[List of Skewb methods|Skewb]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ...&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f5f5f5; text-align:center;&amp;quot;  | &#039;&#039;&#039;[[List of Rubik&#039;s 360 methods|Rubik&#039;s 360]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ...&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Substep]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:Substeps|Common substeps]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Algorithm Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Solving Variants]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External links ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Speedsolving.com: [http://www.speedsolving.com/forum/showthread.php?t=2402 BCE Methods] - methods based around Blockbuilding, Corners First and Edges First.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lists|methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lists of methods|methods]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Neodam</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>